Yamaha CX A5100 Owner’s Manual Web YH133A0 EN Om UCABGLVF

User Manual: Yamaha CX-A5100 Owner’s Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 187

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Pre-Amplifier

Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

English

CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

7 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting a device with analog multichannel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

FEATURES

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CINEMA DSP HD3 for new surround format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 45

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

PREPARATIONS

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

PLAYBACK

2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting a power amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Connecting subwoofers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 40

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

CONFIGURATIONS

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

112

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Playing back music via AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 96

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 143

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 145

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
En

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

APPENDIX

160

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Accessories

Operating range of the remote control

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.

 Remote control

 Batteries (AAA, LR03, UM-4) (x4)

Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

Insert the batteries the right way
round.

 AM antenna

 FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.

 YPAO microphone

 Microphone base
Pole
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise
specified.
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
*Using for angle/height measurement
during YPAO.

 Power cable

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

 CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
 Setup Guide
 Safety Brochure

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.

•

indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

•

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
• Bluetooth
• iPod/iPhone
• USB
• Media server (PC/NAS)
• Internet radio
• AirPlay

.
.
.
.
.
.

Supports 2- to 11-channel balance/unbalance
pre-out and up to 2 subwoofer connections.
Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in
various styles.

p.79
p.80
p.84
p.87
p.91
p.94

• Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.45
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
• Reproducing stereo or latest
. p.70
multichannel sounds such as Dolby
Atmos with the sound fields like actual
movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP HD3)
• Enjoying compressed music with
. p.74
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)

Control

Network contents
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device

Speakers

Audio (via power amplifier)

Audio
USB device

HDMI Control

4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
Audio/Video

BD/DVD player

AV receiver (the unit)
Playback of Dolby Atmos contents
supported

Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.22

. p.67

Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
TV remote control

. p.177

Full of useful functions!
❑ Connecting various devices (p.35)

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.72)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect
video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game
consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable
connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.33)

❑ DAC Digital Filter (p.130)
You can select the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to
have favorite sounds.

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video
output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.

❑ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode (p.114)

HDMI Control
TV audio

By adjusting the elimination level of jitter in digital audio, you can enhance the DAC
accuracy of the unit.

❑ Operating external devices with the supplied remote control
(p.150)

Video from
external device

❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.57)

You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control by registering the
remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players).

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router
(access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables
connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router.

❑ Backlight illumination remote control
The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate the remote control even in a dark
home theater room.

❑ Object-based surround formats supported
The unit supports the new surround formats: Dolby Atmos and DTS:X.
(Firmware update is required to enable DTS:X playback. For details on update, visit the
Yamaha website).

Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct

Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for
audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be
used for the corresponding input source (p.111).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output
(p.128).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input
into the unit (p.133). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.109).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese,
French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.43).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware
(p.148). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV
when a firmware update is available (p.159).
Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details,
see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.112)
• SCENE settings (p.115)
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.118)
• Various function settings (p.121)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.144)
• System settings (p.146)

CINEMA DSP
The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment
of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

CINEMA DSP HD3

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard
directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the
walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is
affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken
together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual
sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA
DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide
variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP.
By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source
such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of
that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you
the sensation of actually being in that scene.)
In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that includes
the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial sense.

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.
Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field

“CINEMA DSP HD3” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field playback technology that
takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the
sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than
twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA
DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural
and powerful spatial sound field.

Level

Capability for reproducing reflections
(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)
CINEMA DSP HD3

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

CINEMA DSP HD3 for new surround format

YPAO

In 2014, the new surround audio format that employs “object-based audio” was
announced (such as Dolby Atmos). With object-based audio, sounds can be allocated
freely in 3D space.

YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and
surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal
listening environment for maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting
various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.

The algorithm for CINEMA DSP of this model has been renovated to support those
signals,
This can enhance the depth of 3D sound experiences and provide high-realistic
sensation to immerse you in movies.

YPAO-R.S.C.

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

In typical home, the sound has problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a
smearing of the acoustical sound image caused by undesirable sound reflection from
the walls or ceiling. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted
reflections and produces the acoustic perfection for your listening environment.
Level

Compensation
Time

YPAO Volume

YPAO Volume ON

Level

High

YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high and low frequency levels at any volume
level so that you hear natural sounds even at low volume.

YPAO Volume OFF

Low

Frequency

High

YPAO 3D measurement

Unrivaled audio and video quality

The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers, and the height of
presence speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation
is applied to maximize the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.

High-resolution music enhancer 32-bit
Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 32-bit can be applied to lossless
44.1/48 kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further
heightening of the musicality in the original content (p.110).

Loudness

Before processing
Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz
signal (such as a CD)

Frequency

YPAO High Precision EQ

After processing
Playback bandwidth of a
88.2/96 kHz signal

Loudness

Apply 64-bit high-precision processing for full-band PEQ to reduce noise by error
component and 32-bit signal transmission (from DSP to D/A converter) to create
highly-natural surround sounds.

Frequency

High-quality video processing
From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played
back as a high-quality image (p.131).
• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing
• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection
• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source
You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.

Expandable to meet diverse needs
The best expandability in Yamaha

Multi-zone function

Useful applications

By connecting a power amplifier, you can enjoy the
highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel
3-dimensional sound field.

The multi-zone function (p.96) allows you to play back
different input sources in the room where the unit is
installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

■ AV CONTROLLER

Power amplifier

(The following shows examples of use.)
Enjoying music using speakers in another room
While enjoying multichannel playback in your living
room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a
different room.
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into
a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network
products. This application provides you the flexibility to
control the available inputs, volume, mute, power
commands and playback source.
Functions
Study room
(such as Zone2)

• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• DSP Parameter adjustment

Living room (main zone)

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room
(HDMI connection)
• Flexible connectivity (ready for balanced and
unbalanced connections)

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living
room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via
HDMI on a TV in a different room.

• High-quality audio transmission (XLR balanced
pre-out)
• XLR balanced input jacks for connecting a high-end
CD player
Kitchen
(such as Zone4)

Living room (main zone)

• Playback control (including music selection for some
sources)

• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or
Google Play.

Part names and functions
Front panel
1

MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT
ON SCREEN

OPTION

SCENE

TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

ENTER

RETURN

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

6
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.133)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.134)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.135)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.137)
• An iPod is being charged (p.80)

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI IN

7
6 INPUT knob

Opening the front panel door

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.14).

8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.

3 Front display
Displays information (p.15).

4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.74).

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

■ Inside of the front panel door
9

AB C

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SCENE

TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1

INFO (WPS)

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

(CONNECT)

MULTI ZONE

PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

M
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.107).

B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.106).

C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.108).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 or
Zone3 (p.101).

D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.73).

E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.69).

F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.67).

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI IN

G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2–4
ZONE CONTROL

N YPAO MIC jack

Enables/disables the audio output to
each zone (p.100).
Changes the zone that is controlled by
the keys and knobs on the front panel
(p.100).

H INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.106).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.60).

I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.76).
Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.102).

J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.75).

K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.76).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.102).

L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.75).

M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.84) or an iPod
(p.80).

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.45).

O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.38).

Front display (indicators)

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.

2 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.57).

3 ZONE indicators
Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.100).

4 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

5 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.106).

6 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.

7 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

BC D

1 HDMI

MUTE VOLUME

ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
HD 3

8 VIRTUAL

E ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.70) or the virtual surround
processing (p.72) is working.

9 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device
(p.79).

0 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74) is
working.

A CINEMA DSP indicator
“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.70) is
working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP
HD3 is activated.

B STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.

C PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode (p.101).

D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.108) is working.

F Channel indicators
Indicate channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are
output.
A Front (L)
S Front (R)
D Center
F Surround (L)
G Surround (R)
H Surround back (L)
J Surround back (R)
K Surround back
B Front presence (L)
N Front presence (R)
M Rear presence (L)
< Rear presence (R)
C Subwoofer (1)
V Subwoofer (2)

Rear panel
1

2 3 4

B C

D
(U.S.A. model)

DC OUT
5V 0.5A

NETWORK

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

HDMI OUT

ARC

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

AV 2

NETWORK

HDMI
AV 3

AV 5

AV 4

AV 6

AV 5 AV 7

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

RS-232C

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

(ZONE OUT)

AC IN

MULTI CH INPUT
AV 1
AV 2

PHONO

L(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3
CENTER

AV 1

4
(1 AV
BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
Y OUT
ZONE

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AV OUT

PY
B

COMPONENT VIDEO
PR AV 3
PPRB
Y

PYB

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

C
B

PPRB

AV 1

A
GND

TRIGGER
OUT

1
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR

AV 2
SURROUND

PHONO

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

AUDIO 2

REMOTE
1

REMOTE RS-232C
2

OUT OUT

OUT

2
A

L
L

TRIGGER
OUT

AV 1

PR 4Y
AV

MULTI
CH INPUT
(SINGLE)
PRE
OUT

AUDIO
3
ZONE
OUT

C
AV
D 3

(FRONT)
CENTER 1

2
12V

ZONE OUT

0.1A

12V

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

0.1A

L
2

R
R

R
R
GND

1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL
1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
5 COAXIAL 56 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ANTENNA FM
HD75Ω
Radio

FRONT
FRONT

SURROUND
SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK
SUR.
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER

CENTER
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT
PRESENCE
FRONT

REAR
PRESENCE
SURROUND

ANTENNA
AM

(REAR)

SURROUND
BACK

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

REAR
PRESENCE

(4 RADIO)

AC IN

(4 RADIO)

75Ω
FM

R
R

AUDIO 4
AUDIO 4

L
L

REAR
R PRESENCE
R REAR
PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE

R SURROUND
BACK
R SURROUND
BACK

R SURROUND
R SURROUND

PRE OUT
PRE
OUT
CENTER
CENTER

R FRONT
R FRONT

L FRONT
L FRONT

L SURROUND
L SURROUND

L SURROUND
BACK
L SURROUND
BACK

FRONT
L PRESENCE
L FRONT
PRESENCE

REAR
L PRESENCE
L REAR
PRESENCE

* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.

1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.37).

2 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multichannel output
and inputting audio signals (p.41).

3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.37).

4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.35).

5 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.33). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.34), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.98).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(component/composite video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.34) or for
connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3
(p.97).

7 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.35).

8 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.36).

9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.41).

0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.99).

A NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.40).

B Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.57).

C RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.

D AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.42).

(U.S.A. model)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A

NETWORK

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

HDMI OUT

ARC

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 4

AV 2

NETWORK

HDMI
AV 3

AV 5

AV 4

AV 6

AV 5 AV 7

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

RS-232C

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

(ZONE OUT)

AC IN

MULTI CH INPUT
AV 1
AV 2

PHONO

L(1 BD/DVD)

AV 3
CENTER

AV 1

4
(1 AV
BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
Y OUT
ZONE

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AV OUT

PY
B

COMPONENT VIDEO
PR AV 3
PPRB
Y

PYB

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

C
B

PPRB

AV 1

A
GND

TRIGGER
OUT

1
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR

AV 2
SURROUND

PHONO

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 2

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 3

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

AUDIO 2

REMOTE
1

REMOTE RS-232C
2

OUT OUT

OUT

2
A

L
L

TRIGGER
OUT

AV 1

AUDIO
3
ZONE
OUT

PR 4Y
AV

MULTI
CH INPUT
(SINGLE)
PRE
OUT

C
AV
D 3

(FRONT)
CENTER 1

2
12V

ZONE OUT

0.1A

PRE OUT

12V
(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

0.1A

L
2

R
R

R
R
GND

1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL
1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
5 COAXIAL 56 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT
FRONT

SURROUND
SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK
SUR.
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER

CENTER
ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT
PRESENCE
FRONT

REAR
PRESENCE
SURROUND

ANTENNA

ANTENNA FM

HD75Ω
Radio

(REAR)

SURROUND
BACK

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

REAR
PRESENCE

(4 RADIO)

AC IN

(4 RADIO)

75Ω
FM

R
R

AUDIO 4
AUDIO 4

L
L

REAR
R PRESENCE
R REAR
PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE
R FRONT
PRESENCE

R SURROUND
BACK
R SURROUND
BACK

R SURROUND
R SURROUND

R FRONT
R FRONT

PRE OUT
PRE
OUT
CENTER
CENTER

L FRONT
L FRONT

L SURROUND
L SURROUND

L SURROUND
BACK
L SURROUND
BACK

FRONT
L PRESENCE
L FRONT
PRESENCE

REAR
L PRESENCE
L REAR
PRESENCE

* The area around the video/audio output
jacks is marked in white on the actual
product to prevent improper connections.

E
E AUDIO 4 (XLR) jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.37).

F ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or
Zone3 and outputting audio (p.97).

G ANTENNA jacks

I PRE OUT (XLR) jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.39).

H PRE OUT (RCA) jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or
to a power amplifier (p.31).

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.31) or
a power amplifier (p.30).

Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 RECEIVER z key

SOURCE RECEIVER

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

SOURCE/RECEIVER key

Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.152). You can operate
the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external
device when this key lights up in green.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

3 Display window

MUTE

4 Input selection keys

VOLUME

C
D

OPTION

ON SCREEN

E
F

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

7
A

CLASSICAL

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT

TV VOL

TV CH

0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.82).

A PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.76).

B TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.150).

Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7
AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4
AUDIO 1–4 jacks
TUNER
FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth
receiver)
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
PHONO
PHONO jacks
MULTI
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
[A], [B]
Change the external device to operate with
the remote control without switching the input
source.
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.67).

6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.69).

MUTE

7 External device operation keys
Select menus for external devices (p.152).

8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

Adjust the volume.

D MUTE key

5 SCENE keys
LIVE
CLUB

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

C VOLUME keys

Displays remote control information.

POP-UP/MENU

Turns on/off an external device.

SCENE

SOURCE z key

AUDIO

9 Menu operation keys

Mutes the audio output.

E OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.107).

F LIGHT key
Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10
seconds.

G DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.106).

H Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.69).

■ Inside of the remote control cover
I Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.69).

SOURCE RECEIVER

J INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display
(p.106).

K Numeric keys

V-AUX

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

L ZONE key

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control
(p.100).

M PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.101).

SCENE

N HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.66).

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

O Radio keys
TOP MENU

Operate the FM/AM radio (p.75).
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
FM
Switches to FM radio.
AM
Switches to AM radio.
TUN./CH
Select the radio frequency.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

P SLEEP key

RETURN

I
J

DISPLAY

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

TV VOL

TV CH

TV
7
INPUT

10
MUTE

TUN./ CH

PRESET

M
N

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).

Q LEVEL key
Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.127).

R SETUP key
Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.149).

P
Q
R

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.149).

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.21)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the power amplifier. For details
on speaker connections, refer to the instruction manual for the power amplifier.

2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (p.30)

Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

3 Connecting a TV (p.33)

Connect a TV to the unit.

4 Connecting playback devices (p.35)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD
players) to the unit.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.39)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless
antenna (p.40)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

7 Connecting other devices (p.41)

Connect external devices such as a device with analog multichannel output and a
device compatible with the trigger function.

8 Connecting the power cable (p.42)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.43)

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.44)

According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.

11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.45)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit
your room (YPAO).

12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.57)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 Placing speakers
The unit has 11.2-channel pre-amplifiers. You can connect 2- to 11-channel speakers (via a power amplifier) and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your
room.
You can also apply multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.96).
Ideal speaker layout

Functions of each speaker
Speaker type

Abbr.

Function

Front (L)

Front (R)

Center

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and
vocals).

Surround (L)

Surround (R)

Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers
also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround
back speakers are connected.

Surround back (L)

Surround back (R)

Front presence (L)

Front presence (R)

Rear presence (L)

Rear presence (R)

Subwoofer

0.5 to 1 mR
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

E 0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

4
10°~30°

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA
DSP HD3 (p.70), the presence speakers create a natural
3-dimensional sound field in your room.

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and
reinforces bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

Y
6

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.

10°~30°

7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m
(5.9 ft)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 9.2-channel system [★5.1.4] (using rear presence speakers)
• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.

• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence
speaker layout” (p.26).

❑ 11.2-channel system [★7.1.4]

R
2
3

R
1

2
3

9
T

Y
6

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a
highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker
(VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.100), the rear presence right/left channel output is not available in the
main zone.
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”
setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44).

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.100), the rear presence left/right channel output is not available in the
main zone.
• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby
Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”
setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.44).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
❑ 9.2-channel system [★7.1.2] (using surround back speakers)
E

❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)

R
1

2
3

5
6

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds
using the surround back speakers.

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as
the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before
performing YPAO (p.44).

• This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround
speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,
center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows
you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for
7.1-channel contents.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
❑ 2.1-channel system

❑ Presence speaker layout
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear
Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your
listening environment.

• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP HD3 with any layout pattern.
• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.

Front Height/Rear Height
Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom
sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of
front and rear sound spaces effectively.

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”
(p.27).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Dolby Enabled SP

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers

Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a
reference.

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from
speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

When using two presence speakers

FPR

When using four presence speakers

FPR

RPR

FR
SBR

SBR
C

SBL
FL

FPL

RPL

• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled
speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Dolby Enabled speakers.

Installation position

Just above the listening position, or the
ceiling between extensions of front
speakers and listening position

Front presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the
front speakers and listening position
Rear presence speakers:
the ceiling between the extensions of the
listening position and surround (or
surround back) speakers

Caution
• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks

■ Video jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable.

Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance
blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs.

AV 1

HDMI cable

Component video cable

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long
to prevent signal quality degradation.

AV 1

PR
PB

❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and Ultra HD (4K)
video transmission features.

AV 1

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or Ultra HD (4K) videos.

Video pin cable

■ Audio jacks

❑ XLR jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit analog audio signals. Use an XLR balanced
cable.

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.

About the XLR jacks

XLR input jacks
Match the pins and insert the “male” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.

Digital optical cable

XLR balanced cable (male)
IO
AUD

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the PUSH
button on the unit and then pull the connector out.

XLR output jacks

❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable or an audio pin cable (RCA unbalanced cable).

XLR input jacks
2. HOT

1. GND

3. COLD

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Digital coaxial cable

• The pin assignments for the XLR jacks of the unit are shown
below. Before connecting an XLR balanced cable, refer to the
instruction manual of your device and verify that its XLR jacks
are compatible with the pin assignments.

Match the pins and insert the “female” connector of the
XLR balanced cable until you hear a click.
XLR balanced cable (female)
UT
EO
PR TER
N

Stereo pin cable

• When disconnecting the cable from the unit, hold down the lever of
the connector and then pull it out.

XLR output jacks
1. GND

2. HOT

3. COLD

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2 Connecting the power amplifier and subwoofers
■ Balanced connection

Connecting a power amplifier

Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (XLR) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with XLR balanced cables.

Connect the input jacks of your power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit so that
the audio source selected on the unit can be output to the power amplifier for playback.
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection for each channel
depending on the input jacks available on your power amplifier.

• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your power amplifier and verify
that its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).

• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks for each channel output the same signals.

R
OAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

FRONT
PRESENCE

CENTER

(REAR)

The unit (rear)

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

REAR
PRESENCE

ANTENNA

Caution

75Ω

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the power amplifier before making connections.

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

SURROUND
R BACK

(4 RADIO)

R SURROUND

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

PRE OUT
(XLR) jacks

L FRONT

L SURROUND

SURROUND
L BACK

XLR

Speaker
connections

XLR

(Male connector)
Main input (XLR)

REAR
L PRESENCE

Power amplifier

(Female connector)

FRONT
L PRESENCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

■ Unbalanced connection

Connecting subwoofers

Depending on the speaker system you want to use, connect the corresponding PRE
OUT (RCA) jacks of the unit to the amplifier with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced
cables).

Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
Select a balanced (XLR) or an unbalanced (RCA) connection depending on the input
jacks available on your subwoofer.

• We recommend using a power amplifier with volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit).
• The XLR jacks and RCA jacks output the same signals.

The unit (rear)

Power amplifier

HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,
configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to
an AC wall outlet.

WIRELESS

AV 7

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

Caution

REMOTE
IN

RS-232C

Main input
(RCA)

OUT

2
A

AV 1

E OUT

PR Y

AV 3

PRE OUT

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

SUBWOOFER

12V

0.1A

R
ZONE 3

FRONT

(REAR)

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

(REAR)

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure you remove the power cable
of the unit and turn off the subwoofer before making connections.

Speaker
connections

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

REAR
PRESENCE

ANTENNA
Ω

RROUND
CK

R SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

L FRONT

PRE OUT
(RCA) jacks
L SURROUND

L SURROUND
BACK

■ Balanced connection

FRONT
L PRESE

Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (XLR)
1–2 jacks of the unit with XLR balanced cables.

• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your subwoofer and verify that
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).
REMOTE
IN

The unit (rear)

RS-232C

OUT

XLR input
R

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

EAR
SENCE

9
L SURROUND

L SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

FRONT
L PRESENCE

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

XLR

SUBWOOFER
PREOUT (XLR)
1–2 jacks

(Female connector)

REAR
L PRESENCE

(Male connector)

XLR input

(Male connector)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

■ Unbalanced connection
Connect the subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the SUBWOOFER PREOUT (RCA)
1–2 jacks of the unit with audio pin cables (RCA unbalanced cables).
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

T
1

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

(FRONT)

CAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

ANTENNA
75Ω

FRONT
PRESENCE

SURROUND
R BACK

R SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.177).

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

■ HDMI connection

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).

■ Component/composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.34).

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

HDMI OUT jack
The unit
(rear)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

HDMI

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

MULTI CH INPUT

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 1

AV 2

HDMI input

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

HDMI

ARC
SURROUND

PHONO
L

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

SUBWOOFER

HDMI

ZONE OUT

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.

AUDIO

AUDIO 1
GND

(2 TV)
4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 3

FRONT

R SURROUND
BACK

R SUR

75Ω

L
AUDIO 4
R

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

R
R

1 OPTICAL

TV
OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

CENTER

AV 1

AV 3

AV 2

AV 3

Video input
(component video)

AV 4

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 2

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.66).

MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
2

MULTI CH INPUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

(FR

The unit
(rear)

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND
BACK

SURROUND

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI

A
SURROUND

PHONO

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

(RE

SUBW

ANTENNA
75Ω

(4 RADIO)

AUDIO
HDMI OUT

AUDIO 4
L

REAR
R PRESENCE

SURROUND
R BACK

FRONT
R PRESENCE

R SURROUND

R FRONT

(ZONE OUT)

MULTI CH INPUT

AV 1

CENTER

1 OPTICAL

(HDCP2.2)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 1

AV 2

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

R
SURROUND

PHONO
L

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 1

ZONE OUT

HDMI

O
GND

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

ZONE 2

AUDIO 4
R

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

ZONE 3

HDMI input

FRONT

SURROUND
R BACK

R SUR

75Ω

HDMI

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
Projector

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack

Video input
(composite video)

(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

MULTI CH INPUT

AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

CENTER

AV 2

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video
monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor
(p.98).

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 1

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

VIDEO

HDMI OUT
2

TV (already connected)

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

SURROUND

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 1

SUBWOOFER

(2 TV)

AUDIO 3

AUDIO

ZONE OUT

L
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

L
ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND
R BACK

R SUR

75Ω

R
AUDIO 4
R

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

1 OPTICAL

OPTICAL
O

AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

4 Connecting playback devices
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Connecting an iPod (p.80)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.84)

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.140) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.111) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)

MI OUT

DCP2.2)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

HDMI output

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

HDMI (AV 1–7)
jacks

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE
IN

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

HDMI

AV 1

AV 3

12V

HDMI

OUT

2
A

0.1A

(FRONT)

HDMI

SUBW
R

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

(REAR)

REAR
PRESENCE

ANTENNA
75Ω

FRONT
R PRESENCE

SURROUND
R BACK

R SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

L FRONT

L SURROUND

Video device

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

■ Component video connection

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

Output jacks on video device

Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit

Video

Input jacks on the unit

Audio

Component video

Video

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

Composite video

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

PB
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

MULTI CH INPUT

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
2

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

The unit (rear)

AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
The unit (rear)

Audio

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 1–4 (VIDEO)
jacks

AV 4

Video output
(composite video)

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

TRIGG
OU

Video output
(component video)

2
A

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 3

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

AV 3

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3
FM

FRONT

SURROUND
AM

SURROUND
BACK

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

R SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

VIDEO
GND

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

ZONE 2

6 OPTICAL

75Ω

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

AUDIO 4

COAXIAL

(4 RADIO)

R SURROUND

1 OPTICAL

(2 TV)

ZONE

O
L

AUDIO 3

ANTENNA
75Ω

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 2

12V

Y
4 COAXIAL

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 1

(FRONT)

C
3 COAXIAL

V
SURROUND

PHONO

PR Y
(SINGLE)

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

(1 BD/DVD)

CENTER

REAR
R PRESENCE

SUR
R BAC

FRONT
R PRESENCE

O
R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

L
L

L FR

OPTICAL

C
COAXIAL

Video device

R
R

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks

R
L

OPTICAL

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Audio output (PHONO)

PHONO jacks

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.

PHONO

L
R

The unit
(rear)

R
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

GND

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.140) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL
(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

MULTI CH INPUT

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 1

AV 2

GND

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

Turntable

Ground lead
R

SURROUND

• Before connecting XLR balanced cables, refer to the instruction manual of your audio device and verify that
its XLR jacks are compatible with the pin assignments of the unit (p.29).

PHONO
L

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 1

ZONE OUT

GND

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

75Ω

AUDIO 4
L

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

ZONE 3
FM

SURROUND
R BACK

FRONT

COAXIAL

Audio device

R SU

Audio output jacks on audio device

Audio input jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo (RCA)

AV 1–4 (AUDIO [RCA])
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO [RCA])

Analog stereo (XLR)

AUDIO 4 (AUDIO [XLR])

Turntable (PHONO)

PHONO

OPTICAL

XLR

(Female
connector)
XLR

(Male connector)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO [RCA],
AUDIO [XLR]) jacks

Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.80) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.84).

ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.

ZONE 4

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.

ZONE CONTROL

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

❑ HDMI connection

RETURN

ZONE 3

DISPLAY

AUDIO

HDMI IN

The unit (front)

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

HDMI IN

HDMI

Game console

The unit (front)

Game console

Camcorder

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.

Camcorder

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)
jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control on
the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the
unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.33).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Assembling the AM antenna

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

MULTI CH INPUT

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

RE
IN

2
A
SURROUND

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 2

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 3

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

12V

0.1A

(FRONT)

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

Connecting the AM antenna

REAR
PRESENCE

ANTENNA
75Ω

AUDIO 4
R

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

SURROUND
R BACK

R SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

Hold down

Insert

Release

L FRONT

The unit (rear)

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

6 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting the network cable

Preparing the wireless antenna

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.

Internet

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.57).

Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
WAN

PC
LAN

Modem

Network cable

ESS
WIREL

Router
NETWORK
AV 6

Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

AC IN

TRIGGER
OUT
1

REMOTE
IN

RS-232C

OUT

The unit (rear)

12V

• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

0.1A

• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.135).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

7 Connecting other devices
Connecting a device with analog multichannel output

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

You can connect an analog multichannel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a power amplifier or a
Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input
jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the
TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug cable.

• The front channel output should be connected to the AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.

MULTI CH INPUT
jacks

The unit (rear)

Channel output
(Center)

MULTI CH INPUT

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

CENTER

TRIGGER OUT 1–2
jacks
The unit (rear)

ARC

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

NETWORK

AV 4

(Subwoofer)

AV 5

AV 6

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

AV 7

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUR. BACK

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

NGLE)

GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

AV 3

12V

0.1A

12V

(FRONT)

0.1A

(Surround
back)

R
RROUND
BACK

AUDIO 3

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT)

REAR
PRESENCE

NA
O)

AUDIO 4
R

PR Y

RS-232C

OUT

SURROUND

( 3 NET

1
SURROUND

PHONO
L

Power amplifier
(such as
Yamaha MX-A5000)

TRIGGER
OUT
MI (HDCP2.2)

MULTI CH INPUT

Trigger In
(+12V)

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

(Surround)

Device with analog
multichannel output

R FRONT

AUDIO 3
(AUDIO) jacks

PRE OUT
CENTER

L FRONT

L SURROUND

L SURROUN
BACK

System
connector
jack

(Front)

Yamaha
subwoofer

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.141) in the
“Setup” menu.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.111) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

8 Connecting the power cable
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)

NETWORK

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AC IN

OTE

RS-232C

To an AC wall outlet

OUT

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

SURROUND

SURROUND
L BACK

FRONT
L PRESENCE

REAR
L PRESENCE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,
Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

V-AUX

1
2

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.

VOLUME

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

6
7

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

10 Configuring the necessary speaker settings

AUDIO

When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel
system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.25)

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 
“Layout”  “Surround” (p.126).

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.26)

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

1
2

POP-UP/MENU

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos
playback

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 
“Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.126).

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”
and then “Manual Setup”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

TV CH

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence
speaker layout and press ENTER.

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

TV
INPUT

MUTE

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

c If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its
layout in “Rear Presence”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

11 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

VOLUME
SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.

MIN

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

ENTER

MAX

MIN

MAX

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
– Do not connect headphones.

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

RETURN

TV CH

1
2
3

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

YPAO MIC
jack

YPAO MIC

Turn on the power amplifier.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit.

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN to select “CANCEL” and proceed to
Step 4.

The unit (front)

E
1

YPAO
5
microphone

Ear height

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
❑ Multi Position

The following screen appears on the TV.

SOURCE RECEIVER

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Selects multi measure or single measure.
AV

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
TOP MENU

Settings

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround
sound. You can take measurements at up to 8
different positions in the room. The speaker settings
will be optimized to suit the area defined by those
positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always
be fixed. Take the measurements at only one
position. The speaker settings will be optimized to
suit that position (single measure).

If desired, select the measuring options.
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.46) or
“Angle/Height” (p.47) and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the
key in orange) and then use the cursor keys.

TV CH

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.51)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.48)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Single measure

❑ Angle/Height

Multi measure
(5 listening positions)

Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.

e
bac

Settings

Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)

b
c a e
d

c
a b
d

Yes

Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will measure angle of
each speaker and height of the presence speakers at the listening
position, and correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can
create more effective sound fields.

No (default)

Disables the angle/height measurement.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.55) or “Warning messages” (p.56).

SCENE

Proceed to Step 2.

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the
measurement.

(When angle/height measurement is enabled)

• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.

Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.
b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.
Pole

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

(When angle/height measurement is disabled)

Proceed to Step 3.
Microphone base

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
c Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the
YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

SOURCE RECEIVER

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.
f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

Microphone base
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.
Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.
• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement
finishes.

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.
The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.53).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

V-AUX

Caution
AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.108) in the
“Option” menu.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)

SOURCE RECEIVER

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
(When angle/height measurement is disabled)

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.55) or “Warning messages” (p.56).

SCENE

Proceed to Step 5.

• Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the
TV.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

(When angle/height measurement is enabled)

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.

Proceed to Step 4.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

Perform the angle/height measurement.
a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.
Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.

TUNER

PHONO

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle
measurement finishes.

V-AUX

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MULTI

[A]

[B]

b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.

AUDIO

c Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be
seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the
position “1”.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the
positions “2” and “3”.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the
fourth angle measurement.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Microphone base

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle
measurement finishes.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

V-AUX

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.53).

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

Checking the measurement results
PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

You can check the YPAO measurement results.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.

DISPLAY

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

MODE

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

3
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Wiring

Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with
the reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Distance

Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level

Output level adjustment for each speaker

Angle
(Horizontal)

Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening
position

Height

Height of the presence speakers above the level of the
listening position

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.120).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

• If there are speakers that cannot be detected, check the power amplifier
settings and connections.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message

Cause

Remedy

E-1: No Front SP

Front speakers are not detected.

E-2: No Sur. SP

One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP

One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL

A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.

E-8: No Signal

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.

E-9: User Cancel

The measurement has been canceled.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP

One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the rear presence speakers).

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit and power amplifier, and then check the
power amplifier connections (to the unit or to the corresponding speakers).
(This error message will be also displayed if you perform YPAO when the power amplifier is turned off.)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

Cause

Remedy

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.53) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

The pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the unit and power
amplifier are not same.

Check the pin assignments of the XLR jacks of the power amplifier. If they are not compatible with the pin
assignments of the unit (p.29), change the pin assignment setting of the power amplifier or use unbalanced
(RCA) connections.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.53) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.53) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

W-1: Out of Phase

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

12 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.

■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Selecting the connection method

You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.12) to
control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on
the unit.

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)

Internet

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.64).

Wireless router

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.40) or the
wireless network connection (p.58).

Modem

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
– Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.58).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.40) or Wireless Direct (p.64).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.

V-AUX

Select a connection method according to your environment.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?

Yes

A (p.58)

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?

VOLUME

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

RETURN

B (p.60)

No
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

Yes

C (p.61)

DISPLAY

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

MODE

■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)

AUDIO

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

The following connection methods are available.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Wireless (WAC)

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see
“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)

USB Cable

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing
the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

The name of the unit

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
Tap here to start setup

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

The network currently selected

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

V-AUX

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
ZONE 2
RETURN

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

DISPLAY

VIDEO AUX

PHONES

PROGRAM

MUTE

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

The unit (front)

1
2

SCENE

■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

AUDIO

VOLUME

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.

Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.

PRESET

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

TV CH

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

V-AUX

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.

1
2

AUDIO

TUNER

■ C: Using other connection methods

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

VOLUME

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

3
4

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

5
6

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

TV CH

The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.58).

Access Point
Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching
for an access point. For details on settings, see
“Searching for an access point” (p.62).

Manual Setting

You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.62).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point). The method is available if the wireless
router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code
method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN
code” (p.63).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MULTI

[A]

[B]

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

AUDIO

PHONO

❑ Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.

MUTE

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.

V-AUX

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

AUDIO

TUNER

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).

VOLUME

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

DISPLAY

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.

TV
INPUT

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.

TV CH

MUTE

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

V-AUX

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.

Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

1
2

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

3
4

Press ON SCREEN.

5
6

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.

TV CH

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.

Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SOURCE RECEIVER

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.

V-AUX

Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.

PROGRAM

MUTE

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.

MODE

The settings made appear on the TV screen.
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.

12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

VOLUME

ON SCREEN
TOP MENU

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.

c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.

SCENE

11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

TV CH

MUTE

The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.

PLAYBACK

SOURCE RECEIVER

Basic playback procedure

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Input selection keys

SCENE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

MUTE
ON SCREEN

MUTE

TOP MENU

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.

On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.75)

HDMI OUT

10
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.

HDMI¡OUT¡Sel.
¡¡¡OUT¡1+2

• Playing back iPod music (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.84)

TV
7
INPUT

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.79)

TUN./ CH

PRESET
4

For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.

DISPLAY

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.87)

OUT 1+2

• Listening to Internet radio (p.91)

OUT 2

• Playing back music via AirPlay (p.94)

Off

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.67).
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.108).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.139), you can turn on/off
each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SOURCE RECEIVER

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
AV

V-AUX

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

SCENE

Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

VOLUME

SCENE (SCENE key)

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN
OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

HDMI Output

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

TV
PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

AV 1

AUDIO 1

NET RADIO

TUNER

Audio Select (p.111)

Auto

—

HDMI Output (p.66)

OUT 1+2

Sound Program (p.69)

Sci-Fi

STRAIGHT

11ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.129)

Auto

Enhancer (p.74)

Off

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.110)

---

Mode

PRESET

INPUT

Input (p.66)
Input

TV CH

MUTE

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.114).

On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.

Configuring scene assignments

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Input selection keys

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

SCENE

¡¡¡¡SCENE1
¡SET¡Complete

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the
display window on the remote control.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.151) to register it.

MUTE

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.115) in the “Scene” menu.

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.116) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift,
Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim

Video

Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Volume

Master Volume

Lipsync

Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

Selecting the sound mode

SOURCE RECEIVER

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• MOVIE THEATER category (p.70):
Press MOVIE repeatedly.

SCENE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

PROGRAM
ON SCREEN

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
STEREO
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER

• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.74).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.74).

• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.71):
Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games.

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback

a Press ON SCREEN.

• CLASSICAL category (p.71):
Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.

• LIVE/CLUB category (p.72):
Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly.

b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.

• STEREO category (p.72):
Press STEREO repeatedly.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.117).

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback.

❑ Selecting a surround decoder
SUR.
DECODE

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
channel indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.15) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.143).

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

About Dolby Atmos®

This mode lets you enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel
sources (p.73).

• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or
multichannel PCM format in the following situations.
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

TUN./ CH

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.72) does not work.

• Press STRAIGHT.
• This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original
channels (p.73).

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3)

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
3).

technology (CINEMA DSP HD It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.

Sound program category

¡¡MUSIC
HD 3

¡¡CLASSICAL
Hall¡in¡Vienna

VOLUME
VIRTUAL
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1
SR
PL
PR

Sound program
“CINEMA DSP !” lights up

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we
recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and
rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).
• The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to
produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear
presence speakers.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program
adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of
background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer
for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Hall in Munich A

This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats in
Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for
European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center
left of the arena.

Hall in Munich B

This hall is frequently used for recording orchestral music, and is a
shoe-box type concert hall with around 1,300 seats. The hall is constructed
from marble, resulting in relatively flat resonance. Further, the high ceiling
causes sound to reverberate for longer than usual.

Hall in Frankfurt

This is a large shoe-box type concert hall with around 2,400 seats located
in Frankfurt. This hall has a very solid, powerful sound. The listener’s virtual
seat is in the center-right section on the first floor.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Hall in Stuttgart

This is a large asymmetrical concert hall with around 2,000 seats located in
downtown Stuttgart. Sound reflected off the concrete wall located to the left
of listeners has a powerful presence.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the
reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as
providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.
The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall
effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will
not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.

This program reproduces vocals clearly, letting you feel the spaciousness
of a pavilion. Reverberation, which is somewhat delayed, reproduces the
live acoustics unique to a pavilion, and helps to make concert scenes more
exciting.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Hall in USA A

This is a large 2,600 seat concert hall in the United States which features a
fairly traditional European design. The interior is relatively simple, in the
American style. The middle and high frequencies are richly and beautifully
reinforced.

Hall in USA B

This spacious arch-shaped hall has a dome ceiling and can seat 2,600. The
ample resonance apparent in the sound is a feature brought about by
longer than average period of reverberation. In addition to this, the reflector
suspended above the stage allows listeners to experience rich sound from
the direction of the stage.

Church in Tokyo

The acoustic environment of an ordinary church with moderate
reverberations. The reverberation lasts 2.5 seconds. This is ideal for
reproducing church organ and choral music.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Pavilion

Disco

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also
characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.

Church in
Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

❑ LIVE/CLUB
Village Gate

This is the sound field at a jazz club that was in New York. It is in a
basement and has a relatively spacious floor area. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center left of the hall.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Arena

This program gives you long delays between direct sounds and effect
sounds, with the extraordinarily spacious feel of a large arena.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front
(Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.25) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)

❑ STEREO
2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

11ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.

• CINEMA DSP HD3 (p.70) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.72) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”
is selected.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.

V-AUX

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.

SCENE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
bPLII Music

Press STRAIGHT.

bPLII Game

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

bPLIIx Movie

bPLIIx Game

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

bSurround

¡¡¡STRAIGHT

DISPLAY

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

STRAIGHT

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back
speakers.

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

MODE

Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all
sources. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos
content) is played.

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.72) works when multichannel source is played back.

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)

MUTE

The surround decoder enables multichannel playback from
2-channel or multichannel sources.
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

TUN./ CH

SUR.DECODE

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.118).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.170).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.

¡SUR.¡DECODE
¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing
(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.72) does not work.
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back
speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except
when a Dolby Atmos content is played).

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

SOURCE RECEIVER

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

V-AUX

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.

SCENE

PROGRAM

¡PURE¡DIRECT

VOLUME

MUTE

Press PURE DIRECT.

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.110) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).

VOLUME
L

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

ENTER

RETURN

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

DISPLAY

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.

– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu

Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.

– Using the multi-zone function

MODE

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

VOLUME
ENHANCER

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

PRESET

“ENHANCER” lights up

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

PURE DIRECT

TV CH

MUTE

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.110) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

ENHANCER

TUN./ CH

SLEEP

Listening to FM/AM radio

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

TUNER

SCENE

PROGRAM

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.

VOLUME

Setting the frequency steps

POP-UP/MENU

(Asia model only)

MUTE

TOP MENU

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

TUN./ CH

PRESET
4

10
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

Press FM or AM to select a band.

Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.

MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

VOLUME

Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

FM 98.50MHz

TUN./CH
Numeric keys

TV
7
INPUT

FM
AM

1
2

FM 87.50MHz

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.

Selecting a frequency for reception

STEREO TUNED

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
PROGRAM

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

4
5

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
En

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.111) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

V-AUX

■ Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

TUNER

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.78).

SCENE

PROGRAM

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

POP-UP/MENU

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

MUTE

Preset
STEREO TUNED

SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

INFO

MEMORY

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

01:FM 98.50MHz
Preset OK

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

TUN./ CH
6

Numeric keys
7

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

Preset
STEREO TUNED

ZONE

SETUP

VOLUME

Preset number

TV CH

01:FM 98.50MHz

TV
INPUT

Preset

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.75)
to tune into the desired radio station.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

■ Registering a radio station

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

02:Empty
FM 98.50MHz

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

STEREO TUNED

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.78).

Radio Data System tuning

SOURCE RECEIVER

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.

(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.

V-AUX

TUNER

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

SCENE

PROGRAM

Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.78).

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

STEREO TUNED

10
MUTE

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

INFO

TUN./ CH

PRESET

7
INPUT

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

■ Displaying the Radio Data System information

■ Receiving traffic information
automatically

Info
Program Type

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

Item name

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
Finished
STEREO TUNED

STEREO TUNED

FM 98.50MHz
CLASSICS

TrafficProgram
TP FM101.30MHz

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

VOLUME

Traffic information station (frequency)

L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Information
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.

Program Service Program service name
Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name
En

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.

TUNER

PHONO

■ Browse screen

Operating the radio on the TV

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

TUNER

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

■ Playback screen

VOLUME

1
TOP MENU

1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

POP-UP/MENU

2 Preset number

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.

MODE

Menu
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.

Function

Memory

Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the
list.

Clear All Preset

Clear all the preset stations.

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

1 Radio station information

Submenu

TV CH

(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.77), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

Utility

2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.
Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

1 Page Up
1 Page Down

Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.

Playing back music via Bluetooth

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

PROGRAM

MUTE

The unit

TOP MENU

Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)

VOLUME

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.137) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

External device
operation keys

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.174).

ENTER

RETURN

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.

BLUETOOTH

SCENE

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.

• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– In the “Setup” menu, select “Bluetooth”  “Audio Receive” 
“Disconnect”.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work
depending on the Bluetooth device).

Playing back iPod music
Connecting an iPod

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod.

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174).

1
2

• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay
(p.94)

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
RETURN

DISPLAY

PHONES

USB
Connected

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is
charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is
set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

■ Browse screen

Playback of iPod content

SOURCE RECEIVER

1
2
3

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.

V-AUX

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

USB

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

1 Status indicators

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

2 List name

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

3 Contents list

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

MODE

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.82).

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

■ Playback screen

SOURCE RECEIVER

■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)

1
2

V-AUX

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

PROGRAM

MUTE

1 Status indicators

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

2 Playback information

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

External device
operation keys

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

MODE

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

SCENE

TV CH

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.

Operate your iPod itself to start playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
AV

V-AUX

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

OPTION

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums
(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

TV CH

MUTE

Repeat
(Repeat)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.

V-AUX

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.

USB

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this
case, use the wired network connection.

Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.

VOLUME

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.174).
TOP MENU

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

POP-UP/MENU

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Connecting a USB storage device

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

MODE

The unit (front)
RETURN

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

DISPLAY

PHONES

PRESET

YPAO MIC

SILENT CINEMA

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.

USB storage device

USB
Connected

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

■ Browse screen
1
2
3

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

1 Status indicators

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

2 List name

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102).

PRESET

TV VOL

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT

4 Item number/total

Function

TV CH

MUTE

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

■ Playback screen

SOURCE RECEIVER

■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.

1
2

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

1 Status indicators

VOLUME

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
External device
operation keys

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

3 Operation menu

MUTE

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

POP-UP/MENU

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Repeat
(Repeat)

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
❑ For Windows Media Player 11

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.40). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174).

1
2
3

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Click “OK” to exit.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.

Media sharing setup
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.

❑ For Windows Media Player 12

1
2
3
4

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Click “OK” to exit.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.

Playback of PC music contents

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.

AUDIO

NET

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102).
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

TV CH

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.

■ Browse screen

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

1
2

1
2
3

■ Playback screen

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

1 Status indicators

VOLUME

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.90) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
TOP MENU

AUDIO

TUNER

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.90) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

POP-UP/MENU

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

2 Playback information

2 List name

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total
External device
operation keys

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

3 Operation menu

5 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Function

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Function

TV CH

1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.113).

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

10 Pages Down

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
AV

V-AUX

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

VOLUME

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

Repeat
(Repeat)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Listening to Internet radio

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
AV

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

NET

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.40). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

SCENE

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.102).

■ Browse screen

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

1
2

1
2
3

■ Playback screen

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

POP-UP/MENU

3 Contents list

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

TV CH

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu

External device
operation keys

MODE

INPUT

AUDIO

TUNER

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu

Function

Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.93).

MUTE

1 Page Up

Function

Bookmark On

Adds the station selected in the list to the
“Bookmarks” folder (p.93).

Browse

Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.

Return

Returns to the higher-level list.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Now Playing

Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

10 Pages Down

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)

SOURCE RECEIVER

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen

Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
You can switch the language.

SCENE

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

DISPLAY

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
MODE

• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.144) in the
“Information” menu.

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.

• To unregister a station, select “My Favorites” in the Home screen, and then
click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name.

Playing back music via AirPlay
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
iTunes

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

(wired or wireless)

Router
The unit

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon (
iTunes (example)

(wired or wireless)

iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)

) appears.

iPod iOS6 (example)

iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
iTunes (example)

iPod (example)

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.174).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.105).

Network name of the unit

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

SOURCE RECEIVER

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
1

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

1
2

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

AUDIO

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.113) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.

SCENE

Caution
PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.

External device
operation keys

MODE

1 Playback indicator

PRESET

Function

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the
guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

Video
(ZONE OUT or HDMI)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in
each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176).
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.

Audio
(ZONE OUT)

Multi-zone configuration examples

Guest room
(Zone2 or Zone3)

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

Living room (main zone)

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.97
TV (for digital video playback): p.98
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.97

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Audio
(ZONE OUT)

Study room
(Zone2 and/or Zone3)
Video/audio
(HDMI)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.97

Kitchen
(Zone2 or Zone4)

Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.98

Preparing the multi zone system

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the
video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.

Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting an external amplifier.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

■ Connecting an external amplifier and speakers to play
back audio

The unit (rear)

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin
cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.

HDMI (HDCP2.2)
1

AV 1

AV 2

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

(HDCP2.2)

AV 2

AUDIO 2

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 3

3 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

AV 1

PRE OUT

PR Y

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

PRE OUT

FRONT

(SINGLE)

AV 3

Video input
(component video or
composite video)

ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT
VIDEO or VIDEO)

(FRONT)

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 1

ZONE OUT

4 COAXIAL

AV 4

PR Y
(SINGLE)

(FR

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

Y
SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

ANTENNA
75Ω

(4 RADIO)

L
ONT
ESENCE

2 OPTICAL

AV 6

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

A
SUR. BACK

ZONE OUT
H INPUT

AV 5

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)

AV 4

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

The unit (rear)
2

AV 3

SURROUND
R BACK

R SURROUND

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

VIDEO

SUBW

ANTENNA
75Ω

O4
L

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

SURROUND
R BACK

(4 RADIO)

R SURROUND

R FRON

External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)

L
R
AUDIO

Zone2 or Zone3
Main zone
Zone2 or Zone3

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or
Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.

Main zone

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in
another room (Zone4).

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to
the unit with an HDMI cable (p.35).

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack

The unit (rear)
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER

HDMI

(ZONE OUT)

ARC

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

(1 BD/DVD)

HDMI input

HDMI OUT
2

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI

AV 4

SURROUND

PHONO
L

SUR. BACK

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

(2 TV)

GND

AUDIO 4
R

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

Zone2 or Zone4
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI

Main zone

Zone4

■ Operating the unit from another room
(remote connection)

Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for
each device before using (p.149).

HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 3

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

AV 5

AV 6

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

REMOTE
IN

RS-

OUT

2
A

AV 1

AV 3

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

SUBWOOFER

12V

REMOTE
IN

PR Y

PRE OUT

0.1A

OUT

Remote control

R
ZONE 3

FRONT

(REAR)

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
L (F

REAR
PRESENCE

ANTENNA
FM

ROUND
K

R SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

R FRONT

OUT

Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)

TRIGGER
OUT

OUT

AV 7

OUT

Infrared signal
receiver

NETWORK

AV 4

REMOTE

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

The unit (rear)

AV 2

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

PRE OUT
CENTER

L FRONT

L SURROUND

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

L SU
BA

Infrared signal
transmitter

Infrared
signal
receiver

External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Main zone

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Input selection keys

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.

Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated
switches.

For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.

Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.75)
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.79)

RECEIVER

SCENE

• Playing back iPod music (p.80)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.84)

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Press RECEIVER z.

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.87)

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled
or disabled.

• Listening to Internet radio (p.91)

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding
zone indicator lights up in the front display.

DISPLAY

• Playing back music via AirPlay (p.94)

• You can also use the web control (p.103) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.
SUR.
MODE
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

TV
7
INPUT

10
MUTE

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is
ongoing in the main zone.

TUN./ CH

PRESET
4

• When Zone3 output is enabled, the rear presence left/right channel output is
not available in the main zone.

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

ZONE

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how
you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,
see “Multi-zone output” (p.176).
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.

100

• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input
source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the
Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.103) or AV CONTROLLER
(p.12).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the
Zone2/Zone 3 input or use the party mode (p.101).

Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4.

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

MULTI

[A]

[B]

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

MUTE

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

PARTY

10
MUTE

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.

TV
7
INPUT

Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min,
30 min, off).

TUN./ CH

PRESET

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.

Setting the sleep timer

DISPLAY

ENHANCER

Press SCENE.

VOLUME

ENTER

RETURN

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same
music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party
mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.
Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as
background music for a house party.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
SCENE

OPTION

ON SCREEN

The following functions are also available when the zone you want
to operate is enabled.

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

SCENE

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

AUDIO

PHONO

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or
Zone4

SLEEP

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB

Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be
operated.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

101

• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode
Set” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu.

• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main
zone.

Registering favorite items (shortcut)

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.

V-AUX

Recalling a registered item
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

BLUETOOTH
USB
NET

SCENE

PROGRAM

• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.

POP-UP/MENU

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

1
2

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
Press MEMORY.

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

Recall Preset
01:USB

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not
connected to the unit.
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not
connected to the network.

Shortcut number (flashes)

TV
INPUT

Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

Memory Preset
01:Empty

PRESET

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

MODE

CLASSICAL

1
2

You can also use PRESET to select a shortcut.

Registering an item

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.93).

TV CH

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.

MUTE

• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

Memory Preset
02:Empty

MEMORY

VOLUME
FPL L C R FPR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
RPL SBL SB SBR RPR

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

TUN./ CH

Numeric keys

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

102

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,
the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
Web browser

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.144) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.105) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

Web control

(wired or wireless)
PC

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.136), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.

Web control

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

(wired or wireless)
Router

The unit

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.12).

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.135) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x

1
2

Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)

103

■ Top menu screen

■ Control screen
3

6
2
3
4

1 PLAY INFO

1 CONTROL

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

2 STATUS

Moves to the top menu screen.

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SCENE

3 SETTINGS

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

Moves to the settings screen.

4 POWER

4 PARTY MODE

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

Turns on/off the party mode (p.101).

5 VOLUME

5 SYSTEM POWER

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

6 RELOAD

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.

Reloads the current status of the unit.

7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.

104

■ Settings screen

2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).

1 Rename

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.136) or the name of each zone
(p.137). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network
Selects the network connection method (p.134) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.135). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.94). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.

MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.136) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.135).

Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.

105

Viewing the current status

SOURCE RECEIVER

Switching information on the front display

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

SCENE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

Info
Audio Decoder

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

DISPLAY

ENHANCER

PARTY

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

TV VOL

TV CH

NET RADIO

10
MUTE

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

INFO

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV
VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Information

Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status

TV
7
INPUT

* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

TUN./ CH

PRESET
4

¡
AV1
¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE

DISPLAY

HDMI OUT

INFO

VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Item
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)

Item name

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay

VOLUME

MUTE

Input source group

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

Input source group

Item

AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)

TUNER

Input source/
Party mode
status

Audio format/
Decoder

* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.77).

106

Sound
mode
CINEMA DSP status

Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
Option menu items

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Option
Tone Control

• Default settings are underlined.
VOLUME
L C R
SL SW1
SR
SBL
SBR

Front display

Item

Function

Tone Control
(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and
low-frequency range of sounds.

108

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume.

108

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the
volume is adjusted.

108

YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)

Dialogue
(Dialog)

TV screen

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3
4

Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
(Dialog Lvl)

109

Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)

109

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.

Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
(Extra Bass)

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

107

109
109

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

110

Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital
audio).

110

Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
Video Processing (V.M)
(Video Process.)
Video Adjustment
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets.
(Video Adjust)

Input Settings
(Input Settings)

Page

110
110

Input Trim
(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources.

111

Audio Select
(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.

111

Video Out
(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.

111

Item

Function

FM Mode
(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.

111

Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.83),
USB storage device (p.86), or media server (p.90).

—

Repeat
(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.83),
USB storage device (p.86), or media server (p.90).

—

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Page

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
Off (Off)

Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On)

Enables YPAO Volume.

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.45).

Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.

Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Settings
Off (Off)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.

On
Off
Input level

108

Volume: high
Output level

Output level

Volume: low

On
Off
Input level

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Setting range
0 to 3

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.

Settings

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.70) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Ideal position

109

Off (Off)

Disables Extra Bass.

On (On)

Enables Extra Bass.

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Video Mode (V.M)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.74).

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• Compressed Music Enhancer works on the main zone, Zone2 and Zone3.

Direct (Direct)

Disables the video signal processing.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.74).

Processing
(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Settings
Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)
Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in
“Adjustment” (p.132) in the “Setup” menu.

Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings
1 to 6

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Settings

On (On)

Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio
signal processing condition.)

Off (Off)

Disables the high-resolution mode.

110

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Configures the input settings.

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Audio Select (A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

Auto (Auto)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR])

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO [RCA or XLR]). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO (RCA or XLR).

Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Off (Off)

Does not output video.

AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

111

Stereo (Stereo)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono)

Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS
4

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.

The input source of the unit also changes.

Item

Function

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon.

113

Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.

113

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.

113

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.

113

Balance Input
Attenuator

Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance
input to avoid sound distortion.

114

Ultra Low Jitter PLL
Mode

Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.

114

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

112

Page

■ Rename/Icon Select

■ Decoder Mode

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

Settings
Auto

Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS

Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings

2
3
4

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Off

Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

Disable

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En

113

■ Balance Input Attenuator

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

Selects whether to activate the attenuator for the balance input (AUDIO 4) so that you
can avoid sound distortion when high-level signals are input.

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.67) using the TV screen.

Activate the attenuator when connecting an audio device which outputs signals of 3 V
(RMS) or higher to the AUDIO 4 (XLR balanced input) jacks (p.37).
Input source
AUDIO 4

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Settings
Bypass

Does not activate the attenuator for the balance input.

ATT.(-6dB)

Activates the attenuator for the balance input to reduce the signal level
(-6dB).

■ Ultra Low Jitter PLL Mode
Enables/disables the jitter elimination function.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned),
AirPlay, SERVER, NET RADIO, (network services), Bluetooth, USB
Settings
Off

Disables the jitter elimination function.

Level 1, Level 2,
Level 3

Enables the jitter elimination function.
The higher level enhances the DAC accuracy, but may cause audio
interruptions on some playback devices depending on the audio clock
conditions. In this case, select lower level.

114

5
6

■ Load

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Device Control

Scene menu items
Item

Function

Save

Registers the current settings in the selected scene.

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.

115

Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon.

116

Reset

Restores the default settings for the selected scene.

116

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Page

Settings

115

Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if
an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.

Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177).

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.68).

Off

115

■ Rename/Icon Select

Detail

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.

■ Setup procedure

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

2
3

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Check or uncheck

Choices
Input

Input (p.66), Audio Select (p.111)

HDMI Output

HDMI Output (p.66)

Mode

DSP Program (p.69), Pure Direct Mode (p.129), Enhancer (p.74),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.110)

Sound

Tone Control (p.108), YPAO Volume (p.108), Adaptive DRC (p.108),
Extra Bass (p.109)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.130), Dialogue Lift (p.109), Dialogue Level
(p.109), Subwoofer Trim (p.109)

Video

Video Mode (p.131), Video Adjustment (p.110)

Volume

Master Volume (p.66)

Lipsync

Lipsync (p.128), Delay (p.129)

Speaker Setup

Setting Pattern (p.124), PEQ Select (p.127)

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.67) for the selected scene.

116

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

5
6
3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

117

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

DSP Program menu items

Item

Function

Settings

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the reverberant
sound and lower to have clear
sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and reverberant
sound generation.

0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the
reverberant sound.

0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower to
weaken it.

• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround
decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs
Item

Function

Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be
used in combination with the
selected sound program.

bSurround*,
bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie),
bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*),
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)

DSP Level

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Adjusts the sound field effect level. Higher to enhance the sound field
effect, and lower to reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and presence sound
field generation.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround sound
field generation.

Surround Back Initial
Delay

Adjusts the delay between the
direct sound and surround back
sound field generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the presence sound field.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround sound field.

Surround Back Room
Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of
the surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence
sound field.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround
sound field.

Surround Back
Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround
back sound field.

1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it.

0 to 10
Higher to enhance the reflectivity,
and lower to reduce it.

118

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “11ch Stereo”.
Sound program

2ch Stereo

Item

Function

Settings

Direct

Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.

Auto, Off

Level

Front / Rear Balance

Left / Right Balance

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type

bSurround

Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.

Monaural Mix

Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.

-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.

Adjust the height volume
balance using the
presence speakers.

0 to 5 to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)

Enables/disables
monaural sound output.

Function

Settings

Center Spread

Selects whether to
spread the center
channel signals to left
and right when
2-channel source is
played.

Off, On
Select “On” to spread center
channel signals to left and right if
you feel the center sound is too
strong when 2-channel source is
played.

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.

Off, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.

0 to 3 to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.

-3 to 0 to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.

Center Image

Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).

-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.

11ch Stereo

Height Balance

Item

bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)

Off, On
Neo:6 Music

• Available items in “11ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

119

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

120

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Setup menu items
Menu

Item

Function

Auto Setup
Setting Pattern

Speaker
Manual Setup

Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

124

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

124

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

124

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

124

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

125

Setting Data Copy

Configuration

Page

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

125

Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

125

Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

125

Subwoofer 1
Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

125

Layout

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers.

126

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

127

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

127

Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

127

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

128

121

Item

Lipsync

Sound

Video

HDMI

Network

Bluetooth

Function

Page

Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

128

Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

128

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

129

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

129

Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

129

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

129

Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.

129

Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

129

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD3.

130

Virtual Presence Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers.

130

Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.

130

DAC Digital Filter

Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter).

130

Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents.

130

Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments).

131

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).

133

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

133

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

134

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

134

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

135

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

135

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

136

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

136

Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.

137

Audio Receive

Disconnect

Bluetooth Standby

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).

137

122

Item

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

137

Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

138

Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.

138

Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

138

Audio Delay

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3.

138

Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

138

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

138

Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

139

Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.

139

HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

139

Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone.

139

Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.

140

Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Multi Zone

Zone4 Set

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

140

Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.

140

Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

141

Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode
Trigger Output2 Target Zone

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

141

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

141

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

142

Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

142

Select an on-screen menu language.

143

Function

Language

Page

Zone Rename

Main Zone Set

ECO

Function

123

■ Setting Data Copy

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Configures the speaker settings manually.

Choices
Pattern1 > 2

Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1

Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Front

■ Setting Pattern

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

Settings

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Configuration
• Distance
• Level
• Parametric EQ

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2

Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.

Settings

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

124

Surround

Front Presence

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

Settings
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Large

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

None

Rear Presence
Settings

Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None

Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Settings

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or
SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2

None

Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2

Settings

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER
1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER
1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels.

Use

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
None

• This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to
"Front".

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the
SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will
produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency
components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and
“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
En

125

Rear Presence

Layout

Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and
subwoofers.

Settings

Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Rear Height

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the
rear side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear
presence speakers.

Settings
Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side
of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.72) works in this case.

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to
“None”.
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).

Front Presence

Subwoofer

Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.
Settings

Settings
Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the
front side wall.

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right
sides of the room.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear
sides of the room.

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front
presence speakers.

Monaural x2

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

Dolby Enabled SP

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.26).

126

■ Distance

■ Parametric EQ

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings

Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2

Manual

Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

■ Level

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the
front speakers.

YPAO:Natural

Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through

Does not use the equalizer.

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,
Subwoofer 2

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.45). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

1
2
3

Adjusting while viewing the front display

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

a Press LEVEL.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.45) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

127

Sound

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.

Configures the audio output settings.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

■ Lipsync

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Settings

Delay Enable

Off

Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Settings
Disable

Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En

128

■ Max Volume

Adjustment

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

■ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level
(-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.74).

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic
adjustment and fine adjustment.

Settings

■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Maximum

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the
selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the
on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the
wall paper is displayed.

Video Off

Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings

129

Off

Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

■ DAC Digital Filter
Selects the digital filter type of the audio DAC (digital-to-analog converter) to have
favorite sounds.

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD (p.70). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3

HD functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 11ch Stereo).

Settings

Settings
Off

Disables CINEMA DSP HD3.

Enables CINEMA DSP HD3.

Sharp Roll-off Type

Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with steep attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce clear sounds.

Slow Roll-off Type

Removes out-of-band noises by the filter with gentle attenuation
characteristics.
It has a tendency to produce soft sounds.

Short Latency Type

Reduces the audio delay caused by the DAC internal digital filter.
It has a tendency to produce responsive and rhythmical sounds.

■ Virtual Presence Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and
surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front
presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence
speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.70).

■ Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos
contents.

Settings
Off

Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Settings

• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set
“Virtual Presence Speaker” to “Off”.

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Settings
Off

Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

130

Disable

Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be
played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.

Enable

Enables playback of object-based audio signals.

Video

Resolution

Configures the video output settings.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video
adjustments).

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.
Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Aspect

Settings
Disables the video signal processing.

Does not convert the resolution.

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.147) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)

■ Video Mode

Direct

Through

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through

Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

131

Detail Enhancement

Adjustment

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You
can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).

Setting range
0 to 50

■ Setup procedure

1
2

Edge Enhancement

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Setting range
0 to 50

Brightness
Adjusts the video brightness.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Contrast
Adjusts the video contrast.

3
4

Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

Saturation

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Adjusts the video saturation.
Setting range
-100 to 0 to +100

132

HDMI

ARC

Configures the HDMI settings.

Enables/disables ARC (p.178) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off

Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Standby Sync

■ HDMI Control

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.177).

Settings

Settings
Off

Disables HDMI Control.

Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

■ Audio Output

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.

Selects a device to output audio.

TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) is set to “Main”.

Amp

Settings
AUDIO 1–3

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.

Default
AUDIO 1

Settings
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

133

Off

Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Network

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Configures the network settings.

Settings
Off

Disables the audio output from the TV.

Enables the audio output from the TV.

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

■ Network Connection

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Selects the network connection method.
Settings

Settings
Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.

134

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.40).

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.58).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the
unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.64).

■ IP Address

■ Network Standby

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).

DHCP

Settings

Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Off

Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

Settings
Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).

■ Manual network settings

1
2

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

IP Address

Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.

4
5
6
7

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

135

■ MAC Address Filter

■ Network Name

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.

Filter

■ Procedure

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

1
2

Settings
Off

Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

• AirPlay (p.94) and DMC (p.113) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.

4
5
6

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

136

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth

Multi Zone

Configures the Bluetooth settings.

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Bluetooth

■ Main Zone Set

Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.79).

Configures the main zone setting.

Settings

Zone Rename

Off

Disables the Bluetooth function.

Enables the Bluetooth function.

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
■ Procedure

■ Bluetooth Standby

1
2

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth
devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.

Settings
Off

Disables the Bluetooth standby function.

Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.135) is set to “Off”.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

137

Initial Volume

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.

Audio Delay
Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is
synchronized with the video.

Settings
Fixed

Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Mono

Max Volume

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Settings
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Off

Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.137).

138

■ Zone4 Set

■ Party Mode Set

Configures the Zone4 settings.

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.101) for each zone.
Choice
Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4

Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Settings

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.137).

■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone3

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main, Zone2, Zone4

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.176).

Audio Output
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
On

Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

139

Disable

Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

Function

Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.

■ Display Set

■ Procedure

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Dimmer (Front Display)

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings

140

Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off

Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Manual

Wallpaper

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is
set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device
connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings

Choices
Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.

Settings

Trigger Mode

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

Zone3

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone3.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.

Zone4

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with power status of Zone4.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of any zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source”.

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.

Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when
“Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.

141

■ Memory Guard

ECO

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Configures the auto-standby setting.

Settings
Off

Does not protect the settings.

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Icon

■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.

142

Language

Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)

Select an on-screen menu language.

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

1
2

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Settings
English

English

日本語

Japanese

Français

French

Deutsch

German

Español

Spanish
Russian

Italiano

Italian
Chinese

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

143

■ Network

Types of information

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ Audio Signal

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

Displays information about the current audio signal.

IP Address

IP address
Subnet mask

Format

Audio format of the input signal

Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE)

DNS Server (P)

The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server

Sampling

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate

The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

MAC Address
(Ethernet)

MAC address

Input

Dialogue
Output

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
The channels (PRE OUT jacks) from which signals are output

• Some information may not be available depending on the signal type.

vTuner ID

Network Name

Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.136)

Wired/Wireless

The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.

(When using Wireless Direct)

■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.

SSID

The SSID of the wireless network

Security

Security method

HDMI Signal

Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

Security Key

Security key

HDMI Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

IP Address

IP address

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address
Network Connection

■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Interface

TV interface

Video Resolution

Resolutions supported by the TV

144

“Wireless Direct” indication

■ System

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

Displays the system information on the unit.
Remote ID

The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.146)

TV Format

The unit’s video signal type (p.147)

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia model only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.147)

System ID

System ID number

Firmware Version

The version of firmware installed on the unit

1
2

Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z

STRAIGHT

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.159).

■ Multi Zone

PROGRAM

Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.
Input

The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume

The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

3
4
5

Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.

The new settings take effect.

145

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
REMOTE CON AMP
ID1

• Default settings are underlined.

Item

Function

Page

REMOTE SENSOR

Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.

146

REMOTE CON AMP

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

146

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia model only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

147

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type.

147

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

MONITOR CHECK

Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.

147

4K MODE

Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.

147

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.

148

INITIALIZE

Restores the default settings.

148

FIRM UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

148

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

148

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1, ID2

1
2

3
4

Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from Step 3.

Settings

6
Turns off the remote control sensor.

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display
window.

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

OFF

Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.

5020

REMOTE SENSOR
ON

Turns on the remote control sensor.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.

PRESET

Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)

Press SETUP.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• The registered remote control codes (p.149) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

146

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)

(Asia model only)

MONITOR CHECK
YES

TUNER FRQ STEP
FM50/AM9

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.131) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings
FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps
and AM by 10-kHz steps.

Settings

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

TV FORMAT
NTSC

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL

4K MODE
MODE 2

Default
U.S.A., Canada, Taiwan and Korea models: NTSC
Other models: PAL

Select the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
Settings

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)
Depending on the connected devices or HDMI cables, videos may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.

147

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP

FIRM UPDATE
USB

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.

■ Firmware update procedure

Choices

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices

Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.

USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.159).

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
INITIALIZE
CANCEL

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

VERSION
x.xx

Choices
VIDEO

Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.145) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

148

Controlling external devices with the remote control

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to
sequentially operate multiple functions at once.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Press SETUP.

Item

Function

LEARN

Assigns a function to each key by learning the
code from other remote controls.

152

PRESET

Registers the remote control code for external
devices.

150

RENAME

Edits the device names or scene names
displayed on the remote control’s display
window.

154

MACRO

Programs macro operations (sequence of
control commands).

155

CLEAR

Clears the remote control configurations.

157

ERASE

Erases a function assigned to each key by
learning.

158

EX-IR

Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the
authorized custom installers only.

SCENE

SETUP
PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

10
MUTE

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and
press ENTER.

—

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

PRESET

TUN./ CH

TV
7
INPUT

Item name

PRESET
4

• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control
automatically exits from the setup menu.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Page

SETUP

149

Registering remote control codes

SOURCE RECEIVER

■ Registering the remote control code for a TV

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.151). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

SCENE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the
CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code.

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.

AUDIO

If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

❑ TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.

INPUT

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL

Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH

Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z

Turns on/off the TV.

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

TV operation keys

Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

TV operation keys

MUTE

TV z

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.

PRESET
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Press TV z and press ENTER.
“----” (empty) or code currently registered

TUN./ CH

Numeric keys

----

SETUP

150

■ Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

Input selection keys

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.
Code currently registered

5098

SCENE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

TV VOL

TV CH

Numeric keys

10
MUTE

Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the
CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your
playback device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.

TUN./ CH

PRESET

7
INPUT

DISPLAY

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A] or
[B] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the
input source after pressing the key.

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

VOLUME

MUTE

Press a corresponding input selection key and
press ENTER.

2
3

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
“OK” appears in the display window.
If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from
Step 3.

To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4
and 5.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

SETUP

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the
4-digit remote control and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and
press ENTER.

PRESET

151

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.68).

SOURCE RECEIVER

SOURCE/RECEIVER

❑ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

SCENE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

SOURCE z
TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

External device
operation keys

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY

MODE
External device
operation keys

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

TV VOL

Returns to the previous screen.
Switches information on the display.
Switches between modes.

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN
MODE

TOP MENU

Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU

Displays the pop-up menu.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected
song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).

TV CH

TV operation keys

MUTE

TV z

External device
operation keys

j
f
g
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys

Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys

Control the TV (p.150).

TUN./ CH
4

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Numeric keys

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
SETUP

152

Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

Select an item.

ENTER

DISPLAY

PRESET

The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.

Turns on/off the playback device.
Cursor keys

Menu operation
keys

Programming from other remote controls
(learning)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and
press ENTER.

LEARN

Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
For TV: press TV z.

4
5

SOURCE RECEIVER

V-AUX

Press ENTER.
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
Remote control of external device

AUDIO

SOURCE RECEIVER

2
3

V-AUX

Perform the following steps (a and b) within
10 seconds.
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys

TV CH

For TV: TV operation keys

TV operation keys

b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned until “OK” appears in the display window.

If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.

7
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

INFO

MEMORY

HDMI OUT

Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are
learned.

TUN./ CH
4

Numeric keys
SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.
d Press RECEIVER z.

PURE
DIRECT
TV VOL

Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
DISPLAY

MUTE

AUDIO

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart

PRESET

INPUT

STRAIGHT

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

STEREO

NET

LIVE
CLUB

MOVIE

CLASSICAL

• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
a Press SETUP.

MODE
External device
operation keys

MODE

USB

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUETOOTH

ENTER

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be
decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display
window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the
new functions.

Note

External device
operation keys

OPTION

ON SCREEN

POP-UP/MENU

TUNER

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

VOLUME

PROGRAM

SCENE

MUTE

[B]

[A]

SCENE

[A]

MULTI

PHONO

MULTI

NET

USB

PHONO

BLUETOOTH

PROGRAM

TUNER

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

SETUP

153

e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.
f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

Editing device names

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

Input selection keys

PROGRAM

To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,
symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).

Press SETUP.

BD/DVD

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

SCENE

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and
press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to rename.
To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

SCENE

You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the
remote control’s display window.

Press ENTER to register the new name.
Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”
appears in the display window.

POP-UP/MENU

RENAME

OPTION

ON SCREEN

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Press one of the following keys to select a device or
a scene.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).

PRESET

For TV: press TV z.

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat
Steps 3 to 6.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.

TV CH

TV z

MUTE

For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.

• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press
ZONE to select a zone.
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Press ENTER.

TUN./ CH

SLEEP

SETUP
ZONE

154

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

Operating multiple functions at once
(macro)

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.
“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)

The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple
functions at once.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

Input selection keys

SCENE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

ENHANCER

PARTY

HDMI OUT

INFO

MEMORY

2
CLASSICAL

LIVE
3
CLUB

ENTERTAIN

5
MOVIE

6
STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE
SLEEP
DIRECT

TUN./ CH

PRESET

10
MUTE

• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.

By default, the following macro operations are available after
pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are
enabled.

Press SETUP.

Macro operations

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Macro operation key

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

TV VOL

TV CH

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.

MACRO

TV
7
INPUT

RECEIVER

1st command

2nd commend

RECEIVER z

Turns on the unit.

(unregistered)

Input selection keys

Turns on the unit.

Selects the
corresponding input
source. (unregistered
for the [A] and [B] keys)

DISPLAY

SUR.
MODE
DECODE

■ Enabling the macro operations

VOLUME

MUTE

For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the
CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and
start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key
operation.

SETUP

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press
ENTER.

155

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z
SOURCE/RECEIVER

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each
macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro
operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out
sequentially according to the programmed remote control
commands.

(Example)
Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as
the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to
“AV1” and dturning on the TV

• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control
codes (p.150) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.152).

a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.

• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume
adjustment) in macro operations.
PROGRAM

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“AV1” and press SOURCE z.

Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and
press ENTER.

MACRO

PRESET

TV CH

TV z

MUTE

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and
press ENTER.

EDIT
SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

INFO

MEMORY

HDMI OUT

TUN./ CH
4

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

SLEEP

d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select
“TV” and press TV z.

Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or
input selection key) to which macro operations are
assigned and press ENTER.
“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.

SETUP

MACRO1

156

To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”
appears on the window display.
If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and
the setting is confirmed automatically.

PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.

VOLUME

MUTE

Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to
include in the macro operations in sequence.
To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,
press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

Input selection keys

SCENE

■ Programming macro operations

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

Input selection keys

PROGRAM

To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,
proceed to Step 5.

To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.

OPTION

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.
You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

POP-UP/MENU

ON SCREEN

Press SETUP.
Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

SCENE

VOLUME

MUTE

TOP MENU

ALL

You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of
settings or clear all the remote control configurations.

SCENE

“ALL” appears in the display window.

■ Clearing the remote control configurations

Resetting the remote control configurations

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and
press ENTER.

When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the
input selection key or TV z.

CLEAR

DISPLAY

Press a key to which the selected process is
applied.

When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection
key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

TV z

MUTE

SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET
LEARN

Clears the functions learned from other remote
controls.

PRESET

Restores the default remote control code settings.

RENAME

Restores the default device name settings.

MACRO

Clears the macro operation settings.

RESET

Clears all remote control configurations and restores
default settings.

HDMI OUT

TUN./ CH
4

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation
key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to
be cleared and press ENTER.

SLEEP

SETUP

157

Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the
window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by
learning

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and
restore the default key assignments.

V-AUX

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

AUDIO

Input selection keys

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

SCENE

PROGRAM

TOP MENU

VOLUME

MUTE

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and
press ENTER.

POP-UP/MENU

OPTION

ON SCREEN

ERASE

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

MODE

CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

TV z

MUTE

4
5

Press ENTER.
Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on
the window display.
If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat
from Step 2.

SUR.
DECODE

ENHANCER

PARTY

INFO

MEMORY

HDMI OUT

Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key
assignments are erased.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

TUN./ CH
4

SLEEP

ENT

LEVEL

ZONE

SETUP

158

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

SOURCE RECEIVER

New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.

V-AUX

AUDIO

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

PHONO

MULTI

[A]

[B]

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).

PROGRAM

MUTE

TOP MENU

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.148).

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

Note

SCENE

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.145). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

OPTION

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

DISPLAY

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.148).

Information
icon

MODE

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
CLASSICAL

LIVE
CLUB

ENTERTAIN
ENTERTAI
T N

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PRESET

TV
PURE
DIRECT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

Message
System Icon

1
2

Read the on-screen description.
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.

159

APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.45). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.124).

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.140) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.129). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 or Zone3 (p.138).

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.142).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.129). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.138).

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.146).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.111).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.134) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.177). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

160

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit and power amplifier, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, power amplifier, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC
wall outlets securely.
b The unit, power amplifier, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.142).

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The unit is not reacting.

161

Problem

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

Cause

Remedy

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.146).

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.149). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate.

Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.152).

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
compatible with the remote control.

Learning is impossible in this case.

Memory capacity is full.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.158).

External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.

The remote control does not learn new functions.

162

Audio
Problem

No sound.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.129).

The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.128).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.124).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.127).

The speaker cable connecting the power amplifier and the speaker
is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the power
amplifier may be malfunctioning.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.128).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.45) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”
menu to “Use” (p.125).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.133).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

163

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.33).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.133).

(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.133). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the
unit with HDMI).

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is
disabled.

Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.139).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume.

The input signal level is too high when AUDIO 4 (XLR) is selected
as the input source.

Adjust the output signal level on the playback device or use “Balance Input
Attenuator” in the “Input” menu (p.114).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or
Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.98).

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

The sound is interrupted.

164

Video
Problem

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.147).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.144). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.179).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.

The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the
VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.35).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.33).

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.66).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.98).

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The video is interrupted.

165

FM/AM radio
Problem

Cause

Remedy

There is multi-path interference.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.111).

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Select the station manually (p.75).

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Select the station manually (p.75).

The AM radio signal is weak.

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.76).

Cause

Remedy

The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.

Enable the Bluetooth function (p.137).

Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection
(p.79).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.

Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is
not working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.79).

Bluetooth
Problem

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

166

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.

Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.

Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.79).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.

Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.135). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.135).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Turn on the wireless router.

The wireless router (access point) is turned off.

Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.

USB and network
Problem

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).

Wireless network is not found.

167

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.87).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.136).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.87).

The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.136).

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.

Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.148).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

Firmware update via the network is failed.

168

Error indications on the front display
Message

Cause

Remedy

Access denied

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.87).

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.

Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.80).

Access error

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.40).
Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.146).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.146).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.87). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed.

Update the firmware again.

No device

Unable to play

169

Glossary
Audio information

Dolby Pro Logic II

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the
Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces
audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically
throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the
introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1
content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional
speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or
products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is
decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker
systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Digital

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

DTS 96/24

Dolby Digital Plus

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Digital Surround

Dolby Enabled Speaker

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology
employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the
listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that
can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall
speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby
surround playback.

DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.

170

DTS Express

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

WAV

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

DTS Neo:6

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DTS:X

■ Others

DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from
channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive
soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X
offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a
television’s built-in speakers to a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a
commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at www.dts.com/dtsx

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

FLAC

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.

Neural:X
Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to
DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound
Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
En

171

HDMI and video information

Network information

Component video signal

SSID

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

Deep Color

WPS

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.

Composite video signal

HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.

172

Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.

CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

CINEMA DSP HD3
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP HD3 feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in
your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

173

■ File formats

Supported devices and file formats

❑ USB/PC (NAS)

■ Supported devices

Sampling
frequency (kHz)

Quantization
bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number
of channels

Gapless
playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

—

✔

• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.

MP3

32/44.1/48

—

8 to 320

—

WMA

32/44.1/48

—

8 to 320

—

❑ USB devices

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48

—

8 to 320

—

• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

—

✔

ALAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96

16/24

—

✔

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192

16/24

—

✔

DSD

2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz

—

File

❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.

* Linear PCM format only

❑ iPod

• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Made for.

iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of July 2015)
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of July 2015)

174

Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

Video device

The unit

HDMI out

TV
Resolution

480i/
576i

480p/
576p

720p

1080i

1080p

480i/576i

720p

1080i

1080p/
50, 60 Hz

480p/576p

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI in

1080p/24 Hz

COMPONENT
VIDEO in

COMPONENT
VIDEO out

COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT
720p
VIDEO in

1080i

480i/576i
COMPONENT
VIDEO

480p/576p

VIDEO

480p/
576p

720p

1080i

1080p

480i/
576i

m
m
m
m
m

1080p
VIDEO in
VIDEO

480i/
576i

COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO
out

COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO out
VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO in

480i/576i

m
m: Available

175

Multi-zone output
■ Audio output
Out
In

■ Video output
ZONE OUT jacks
Zone2

Digital audio (HDMI)

m (*3)

Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*6)

Zone3

m (*6)

HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone2 (*1)

Zone4 (*2)

m (*4)

m (*5)

Out
In

m (*6)

Analog audio
(AUDIO)

USB (including iPod)
(*7)

Network sources (*7)

TUNER

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks
(*8)
COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

Zone2/3

HDMI video
Component video
Composite video
On-screen display
(browse/playback)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*9)

Zone2

Zone4

m
m
m
m: Available

*8 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”
*9 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”

m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.139) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the
main zone is selected)
*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input with the web
control (p.103) or use the party mode (p.101)

176

(Example)

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device

Playback starts

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.33) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.35).

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

• Volume control including mute

1
2

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.

(Example)

OPTION

ON SCREEN

HDMI Control

ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER

ENTER

RETURN

Playback device
also turns off

The unit turns off
(standby)

DISPLAY

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Turn off the TV

Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.67)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.151)

177

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

1
2
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

– “ARC” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.

– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to
the instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.33).

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.68), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).

Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

5
6
7

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

178

HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal type

Audio signal format

Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM

2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM

8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD

DSD

2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit

SACD

Bitstream

Dolby Digital, DTS

DVD-Video

Bitstream
(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

179

Reference diagram (rear panel)

HDMI (HDCP2.2)

HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

NETWORK

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

( 3 NET )

WIRELESS

AV 7

(1 BD/DVD)

ARC

AC IN

MULTI CH INPUT

AV 1

CENTER

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2

TRIGGER
OUT

REMOTE
IN

RS-232C

OUT

2
A
SURROUND

PHONO
L

AUDIO 1
(2 TV)

SUR. BACK

AUDIO 2

SUBWOOFER

AUDIO 3

AV 1

PRE OUT

ZONE OUT

PR Y
(SINGLE)

AV 3

12V

0.1A

(FRONT)

R
GND

1 OPTICAL

2 OPTICAL

3 COAXIAL

4 COAXIAL

5 COAXIAL

6 OPTICAL

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

FRONT

SURROUND

SURROUND
BACK

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT
PRESENCE

(REAR)

SUBWOOFER
L (FRONT) 1

REAR
PRESENCE

ANTENNA
75Ω

AUDIO 4
R

REAR
R PRESENCE

FRONT
R PRESENCE

R SURROUND
BACK

R SURROUND

(4 RADIO)

R FRONT

PRE OUT
CENTER

L FRONT

L SURROUND

L SURROUND
BACK

FRONT
L PRESENCE

REAR
L PRESENCE

(U.S.A. model)

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

180

Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance®.
This receiver supports network connections.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the
Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or
trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Windows™

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.

Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.

Explanations regarding GPL

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.

Google Noto Fonts

Android™

Google Play™

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

181

This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio (Unbalance) x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)
Audio (Balance) x 1 (AUDIO 4) (1:GHD, 2:HOT, 3:COLD)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
(FRONT L/R*, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
* barter to AUDIO 3

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)
• Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
Component x 3 (AV 1–3)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
• Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks
• Analog Audio

• Audio Format

• Video
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Dolby Atmos

- Composite x 1

- Dolby TrueHD

- Component x 1

- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital

• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)

- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express

Other jacks

- DTS

• YPAO MIC x 1

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• REMOTE IN x 1

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• REMOTE OUT x 1

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• Link Function: CEC supported

• RS-232C x 1

TUNER

HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA

• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz

USB

- 480p/60 Hz

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,

- 576p/50 Hz

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

R.PRESENCE L/R)

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- Pre Out (Unbalance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,

- Pre Out (Balance) x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER,

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R,

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

R.PRESENCE L/R) (1:GND, 2: HOT, 3: COLD)

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- Subwoofer Out (Unbalance) x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- Subwoofer Out (Balance) x 2
(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)
- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)
- Headphone x 1

182

Bluetooth
• Sink Function
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

• Post Decoding Format

• Maximum Output Level (0.06%THD)

- Dolby Pro Logic

(RCA Unbalance Preout)

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version................................................. Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile................................................ A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec..................................................... SBC, AAC

Center ...............................................................4.0 V or more

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

Front Presence L/R............................................4.0 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ............................................4.0 V or more
Subwoofer 1–2 ..................................................6.5 V or more

• Maximum Communication Distance....................... 10 m (33 ft)

• Rated Output Level/Impedance

Zone2/Zone3.....................................................4.0 V or more

(RCA Unbalance Preout)

Network

Front L/R .............................................................. 1.0 V/470 

• PC Client Function

Center.................................................................. 1.0 V/470 

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

Surround L/R ....................................................... 1.0 V/470 
Surround Back L/R .............................................. 1.0 V/470 
Front Presence L/R.............................................. 1.0 V/470 

• Internet Radio

Rear Presence L/R .............................................. 1.0 V/470 

• WiFi function

Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................1.0 V/470 

- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
and USB connection

Surround Back L/R ............................................4.0 V or more

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

Surround L/R .....................................................4.0 V or more

- Dolby Surround

• Wireless Output ............................................ Bluetooth Class 2

• AirPlay supported

Front L/R............................................................4.0 V or more

Zone2/Zone3 ....................................................... 1.0 V/470 
(XLR Balance Preout)
Front L/R .............................................................. 2.0 V/470 

- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

Center.................................................................. 2.0 V/470 

- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES),

Surround L/R ....................................................... 2.0 V/470 

(XLR Balance Preout)
Front L/R............................................................8.0 V or more
Center ...............................................................8.0 V or more
Surround L/R .....................................................8.0 V or more
Surround Back L/R ............................................8.0 V or more
Front Presence L/R............................................8.0 V or more
Rear Presence L/R ............................................8.0 V or more
Subwoofer 1–2 ................................................13.0 V or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO ............................................................... 3.5 mV/47 k
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) .......................... 200 mV/47 k
XLR Balance (Audio 4)
Attenuator Off................................................... 200 mV/100 k

Surround Back L/R .............................................. 2.0 V/470 

Attenuator On................................................... 400 mV/100 k

- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz

Front Presence L/R.............................................. 2.0 V/470 

• Headphone Impedance....................................... 16  or more

- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Rear Presence L/R .............................................. 2.0 V/470 

• Maximum Input Signal

Mixed Mode

Compatible Decoding Formats

Subwoofer 1–2 ....................................................2.0 V/470 

PHONO ..............................................................60 mV or more
RCA Unbalance (Audio 2 etc.) ............................2.4 V or more

• Decoding Format

XLR Balance (Audio 4)

- Dolby Atmos

Attenuator Off.......................................................2.4 V or more

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

Attenuator On.......................................................4.8 V or more

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

• Frequency Response (Pure Direct)

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB

DTS Express

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB

- DTS Digital Surround

183

• Total Harmonic Distortion

General

• Filter Characteristics

(Pure Direct, 1 V)

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

PHONO to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (1 kHz)....0.008% or less

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (RCA Unbalance) (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.

...........................................................................0.008% or less

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted)
PHONO to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance)
............................................................................95 dB or more

Video Section

• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Taiwan model]................................ AC 110 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz

• Video Signal Type........................................NTSC/PAL/SECAM

[Other models] ................................ AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption.......................................................... 65 W

• Video Signal Level

AUDIO 2 etc. to PreOut (XLR Balance/RCA Unbalance)

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 

• Power Consumption (No Signals) ..................................... 35 W

..........................................................................112 dB or more

Component

• Standby Power Consumption

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Preout (RCA Unbalance) .....................................2.5 µV or less
Preout (XLR Balance) ..........................................5.0 µV or less
• Channel Separation

Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 
Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more

PHONO (Input 1 k Shorted, 1kHz/10 kHz)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)..... 60 dB or more

................................................................. 86 dB/68 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

................................................................. 86 dB/68 dB or more

........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

Main Zone Preout ............................................................ 14 dB
Zone2/Zone3 Preout ........................................................ 14 dB
• Volume Control
Main Zone.................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

......................................................................................... 0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby Off
(HDMI No Signals)............................................................1.5 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off

AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

• Maximum Gain (Volume: Maximum)

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off

FM Section

Wired ............................................................................ 2.2 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................ 2.2 W
Wireless Direct ............................................................. 2.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On
(Wired), Bluetooth Standby On

• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia model] .................. 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

......................................................................................... 2.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On, Network Standby On
(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
......................................................................................... 3.1 W

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Dimensions (W x H x D)
......................435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) ....................................65 dB/64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna upright)

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%

......................435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

• Antenna Input................................................ 75  unbalanced

• Weight ........................................................... 13.5 kg (29.8 lbs)

Zone2/Zone3
Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

AM section
• Tuning Range

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

[Asia model] ............................ 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

184

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Index
Dialogue 109, 144
Dimmer (Front Display) 140
DLNA 87
DMC 113
Dolby Atmos 22, 44, 69, 130
DSP Program (front display information)

Symbols
Exclamation mark (!)
Lock icon (o) 142

145, 159

Numerics
11.2-channel system 22
11ch Stereo 72
2.1-channel system 26
2ch Stereo 72
4K Ultra HD 179
7.1-channel system 23
9.2-channel system 22

106

E
ECO 142
Error indication (front display) 169
External device control (remote control)
Extra Bass 109

A
Adaptive DRC 108
ADVANCED SETUP 145
AirPlay 94
AM radio 75
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 33, 178
Audio Decoder (front display information)
Auto Power Standby 142
Auto Preset (FM radio) 78

148

CINEMA DSP 9, 70
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 130
Compressed Music Enhancer 74
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer)

Option menu

Lipsync

128

M
106

MAC Address Filter

136
En

185

107

P
Parametric EQ 127
Party mode 101
Power amplifier 30
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio)
Pure Direct 74

HDCP 38, 163, 165
HDMI OUT2 Assign 139
HDMI output selection 66
HDMI signal compatibility 179
Headphone 72
Hi-Res Mode 110

D
Decoder Off (front display information)

Initial Volume 129, 138
Input jack assignment 140
Input Trim (In.Trim) 111
Internet radio 91
iPod content playback 80
iPod content playback (AirPlay)
45

NAS content playback 87
Network Connection 134
Network information 144
Network Name 136
Network Standby 135

Firmware update 148, 159
FM radio 75
Frequency step setting 75, 147
Front display information 106

R
Radio Data System tuning 77
Remote control 18
Remote control ID 146
Rename 113, 116, 137
Repeat 83, 86, 90
Restoring the default settings 148

149

H
106

B
Backing up/recovering the settings
Balanced connection 30, 31
Basic speaker configuration 22
Bluetooth 79
Bluetooth Standby 137
Bookmark 93

Max Volume 129, 138
Memory Guard 142
Menu language selection 43
Multiple room playback 96
Muting 66, 101

S
94

SCENE function 67
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format
Setup menu 120
Short Message 140
Shortcut (Registering favorite items)
Shuffle 83, 86, 90
Signal information 144

147

102

Sleep timer 101
sleep timer 19
Sound program 70, 71
Standby Through 134
Straight decode 73
Subwoofer Trim 109
Surround decoder 73

T
Test Tone 128
Tone Control 108
Trigger function 41, 141
Turntable 37

U
Unbalanced connection 31, 32
USB storage device content playback

V
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 25, 72
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 23, 130
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 22, 130

W
Wallpaper 141
Web control 103
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 58, 134
Wireless Direct 64, 134
WPS 60, 172

X
XLR jacks

Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)
YPAO Volume 108

Z
Zone

96, 137

186

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2015:07:14 10:27:10+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:07:14 10:27:10+09:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Metadata Date                   : 2015:07:14 10:27:10+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:a28505cf-3bce-469b-840f-8238f12a1eea
Instance ID                     : uuid:8f14f217-93c4-4c88-8d5b-61ac50123ce0
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 187

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha CX A5100 Owner’s Manual Web YH133A0 EN Om UCABGLVF

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation